blob: 960b198f36bdf93c16a1b0cc57aa0e64b3b8a8f9 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
17#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000025#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000026#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000027#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
28#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000038#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000040#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000042#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000043#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
44#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000045#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000046#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000047#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000048#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000049using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000050using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000051
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000052#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
53
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000054static cl::opt<unsigned>
55PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(1),
56 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 1)"));
57
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000058static cl::opt<bool>
59DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
60 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
61
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000062static cl::opt<bool>
63SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
64 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
65
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000066static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
67 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
68 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000069
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000070STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000071STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +000072STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000074STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +000075
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000076namespace {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000077 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
78 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
79 ConstantInt *Value;
80 BasicBlock *Dest;
81
82 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
83 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
84
85 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
86 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
87 return Value < RHS.Value;
88 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +000089
90 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000091 };
92
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000093class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +000094 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +000095 const DataLayout *const DL;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000096 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
97 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000098 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000099 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000100 BasicBlock *Pred,
101 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000102 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
103 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000104
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000105 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000106 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000107 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000108 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000109 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000110 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000111 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000112
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000113public:
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000114 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout *DL)
115 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000116 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
117};
118}
119
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000120/// SafeToMergeTerminators - Return true if it is safe to merge these two
121/// terminator instructions together.
122///
123static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
124 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000125
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000126 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
127 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
128 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
129 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
130 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000131 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000132
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000133 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
134 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
135 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000136 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
137 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
138 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
139 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
140 return false;
141 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000142
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000143 return true;
144}
145
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000146/// isProfitableToFoldUnconditional - Return true if it is safe and profitable
147/// to merge these two terminator instructions together, where SI1 is an
148/// unconditional branch. PhiNodes will store all PHI nodes in common
149/// successors.
150///
151static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
152 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000153 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000154 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
155 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
156 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
157
158 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000159 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000160 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
161 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
162 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
163 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
164 if (!Ci2) return false;
165 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
166 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
167 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
168 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
169 return false;
170
171 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
172 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
173 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000174 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
175 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
176 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000177 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
178 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
179 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000180 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000181 return false;
182 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
183 }
184 return true;
185}
186
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000187/// AddPredecessorToBlock - Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will
188/// now be entries in it from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be
189/// flowing into the PHI nodes will be the same as those coming in from
190/// ExistPred, an existing predecessor of Succ.
191static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
192 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000193 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000194
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000195 PHINode *PN;
196 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
197 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
198 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000199}
200
David Majnemer91142c42013-06-01 19:43:23 +0000201/// ComputeSpeculationCost - Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000202/// given instruction, which is assumed to be safe to speculate. 1 means
203/// cheap, 2 means less cheap, and UINT_MAX means prohibitively expensive.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000204static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I, const DataLayout *DL) {
205 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000206 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
207 switch (Operator::getOpcode(I)) {
208 default:
209 // In doubt, be conservative.
210 return UINT_MAX;
211 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
212 // GEPs are cheap if all indices are constant.
213 if (!cast<GEPOperator>(I)->hasAllConstantIndices())
214 return UINT_MAX;
215 return 1;
Louis Gerbarg1f54b822014-05-09 17:02:46 +0000216 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000217 case Instruction::Load:
218 case Instruction::Add:
219 case Instruction::Sub:
220 case Instruction::And:
221 case Instruction::Or:
222 case Instruction::Xor:
223 case Instruction::Shl:
224 case Instruction::LShr:
225 case Instruction::AShr:
226 case Instruction::ICmp:
227 case Instruction::Trunc:
228 case Instruction::ZExt:
229 case Instruction::SExt:
Matt Arsenaultc8fc08c2014-05-30 18:34:43 +0000230 case Instruction::BitCast:
231 case Instruction::ExtractElement:
232 case Instruction::InsertElement:
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000233 return 1; // These are all cheap.
234
235 case Instruction::Call:
236 case Instruction::Select:
237 return 2;
238 }
239}
240
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000241/// DominatesMergePoint - If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as
242/// accepted above, return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
243/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
244/// which works well enough for us.
245///
246/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000247/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
248/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
249/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
250/// set and true is returned.
251///
252/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
253/// Select whose cost is 2.
254///
255/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
256/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
257/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000258static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000259 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000260 unsigned &CostRemaining,
261 const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000262 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000263 if (!I) {
264 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
265 // can be executed unconditionally.
266 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
267 if (C->canTrap())
268 return false;
269 return true;
270 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000271 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000272
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000273 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000274 // the bottom of this block.
275 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000276
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000277 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
278 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000279 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
280 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000281 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000282 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000283
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000284 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
285 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000286 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000287
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000288 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
289 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
290
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000291 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
292 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
293 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000294 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000295 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000296
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000297 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, DL);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000298
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000299 if (Cost > CostRemaining)
300 return false;
301
302 CostRemaining -= Cost;
303
304 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
305 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000306 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000307 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, DL))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000308 return false;
309 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
310 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000311 return true;
312}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000313
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000314/// GetConstantInt - Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
315/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000316static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout *DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000317 // Normal constant int.
318 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000319 if (CI || !DL || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000320 return CI;
321
322 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
323 // ConstantInt if possible.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000324 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL->getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000325
326 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
327 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
328 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
329
330 // IntToPtr const int.
331 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
332 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
333 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
334 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
335 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
336 return CI;
337 else
338 return cast<ConstantInt>
339 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
340 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000341 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000342}
343
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000344/// GatherConstantCompares - Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together
345/// collection of icmp eq/ne instructions that compare a value against a
346/// constant, return the value being compared, and stick the constant into the
347/// Values vector.
Chris Lattner11dafaa2010-12-13 03:30:12 +0000348static Value *
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000349GatherConstantCompares(Value *V, std::vector<ConstantInt*> &Vals, Value *&Extra,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000350 const DataLayout *DL, bool isEQ, unsigned &UsedICmps) {
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000351 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000352 if (!I) return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000353
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000354 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000355 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000356 if (ConstantInt *C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)) {
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000357 Value *RHSVal;
358 ConstantInt *RHSC;
359
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000360 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000361 // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x
362 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
363 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
364 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
365 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
366 if (Not.isPowerOf2()) {
367 Vals.push_back(C);
368 Vals.push_back(
369 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(), C->getValue() | Not));
370 UsedICmps++;
371 return RHSVal;
372 }
373 }
374
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000375 UsedICmps++;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000376 Vals.push_back(C);
377 return I->getOperand(0);
378 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000379
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000380 // If we have "x ult 3" comparison, for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to
381 // the set.
382 ConstantRange Span =
Chris Lattner6b8b4852010-12-18 20:22:49 +0000383 ConstantRange::makeICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000384
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000385 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
386 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
387 bool hasAdd =
388 match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)));
389 if (hasAdd)
390 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
391
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000392 // If this is an and/!= check then we want to optimize "x ugt 2" into
393 // x != 0 && x != 1.
394 if (!isEQ)
395 Span = Span.inverse();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000396
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000397 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Nick Lewycky219e6bc2012-01-19 18:19:42 +0000398 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000399 return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000400
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000401 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
402 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(V->getContext(), Tmp));
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000403 UsedICmps++;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000404 return hasAdd ? RHSVal : I->getOperand(0);
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000405 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000406 return nullptr;
Chris Lattner9b1af512010-12-13 04:18:32 +0000407 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000408
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000409 // Otherwise, we can only handle an | or &, depending on isEQ.
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000410 if (I->getOpcode() != (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000411 return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000412
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000413 unsigned NumValsBeforeLHS = Vals.size();
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000414 unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeLHS = UsedICmps;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000415 if (Value *LHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(0), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000416 isEQ, UsedICmps)) {
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000417 unsigned NumVals = Vals.size();
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000418 unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeRHS = UsedICmps;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000419 if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000420 isEQ, UsedICmps)) {
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000421 if (LHS == RHS)
422 return LHS;
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000423 Vals.resize(NumVals);
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000424 UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeRHS;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000425 }
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000426
427 // The RHS of the or/and can't be folded in and we haven't used "Extra" yet,
428 // set it and return success.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000429 if (Extra == nullptr || Extra == I->getOperand(1)) {
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000430 Extra = I->getOperand(1);
431 return LHS;
432 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000433
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000434 Vals.resize(NumValsBeforeLHS);
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000435 UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeLHS;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000436 return nullptr;
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000437 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000438
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000439 // If the LHS can't be folded in, but Extra is available and RHS can, try to
440 // use LHS as Extra.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000441 if (Extra == nullptr || Extra == I->getOperand(0)) {
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000442 Value *OldExtra = Extra;
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000443 Extra = I->getOperand(0);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000444 if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000445 isEQ, UsedICmps))
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000446 return RHS;
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000447 assert(Vals.size() == NumValsBeforeLHS);
448 Extra = OldExtra;
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000449 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000450
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000451 return nullptr;
Chris Lattner6f4b45a2004-02-24 05:38:11 +0000452}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000453
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000454static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000455 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000456 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
457 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
458 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
459 if (BI->isConditional())
460 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000461 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
462 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000463 }
464
465 TI->eraseFromParent();
466 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
467}
468
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000469/// isValueEqualityComparison - Return true if the specified terminator checks
470/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000471Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000472 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000473 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
474 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
475 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000476 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
477 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
478 CV = SI->getCondition();
479 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000480 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000481 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition()))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000482 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000483 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
484
485 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000486 if (DL && CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000487 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
488 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000489 if (PTII->getType() == DL->getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000490 CV = Ptr;
491 }
492 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000493 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000494}
495
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000496/// GetValueEqualityComparisonCases - Given a value comparison instruction,
497/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000498BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000499GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000500 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
501 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000502 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000503 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
504 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
505 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
506 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000507 return SI->getDefaultDest();
508 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000509
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000510 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000511 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000512 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
513 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000514 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000515 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000516 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000517}
518
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000519
520/// EliminateBlockCases - Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
521/// in the list that match the specified block.
522static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
523 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000524 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000525}
526
527/// ValuesOverlap - Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as
528/// well.
529static bool
530ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
531 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
532 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
533
534 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
535 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
536 std::swap(V1, V2);
537
538 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
539 if (V1->size() == 1) {
540 // Just scan V2.
541 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
542 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
543 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
544 return true;
545 }
546
547 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
548 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
549 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
550 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
551 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
552 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
553 return true;
554 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
555 ++i1;
556 else
557 ++i2;
558 }
559 return false;
560}
561
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000562/// SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor - If TI is known to be a
563/// terminator instruction and its block is known to only have a single
564/// predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is also a value
565/// comparison with the same value, and if that comparison determines the
566/// outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a very limited
567/// form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000568bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
569SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000570 BasicBlock *Pred,
571 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000572 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
573 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
574
575 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
576 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
577 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
578
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000579 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
580 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
581
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000582 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000583 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000584 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
585 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000586 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000587
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000588 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000589 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000590 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000591 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000592
593 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
594 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
595 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
596 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
597 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
598 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000599 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000600 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000601
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000602 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
603 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
604 // uncond br.
605 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
606 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000607 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000608 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000609
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000610 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000611 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000612
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000613 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
614 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000615
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000616 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
617 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000618 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000619
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000620 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
621 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000622 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
623 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
624 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000625
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000626 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000627 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000628
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000629 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
630 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
631 MDNode* MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
632 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
633 if (HasWeight)
634 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
635 ++MD_i) {
636 ConstantInt* CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
637 assert(CI);
638 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
639 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000640 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
641 --i;
642 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000643 if (HasWeight) {
644 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
645 Weights.pop_back();
646 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000647 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
648 SI->removeCase(i);
649 }
650 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000651 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000652 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
653 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
654 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000655
656 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000657 return true;
658 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000659
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000660 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
661 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000662 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000663 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000664 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
665 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000666 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000667 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
668 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
669 }
670 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000671
672 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
673 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000674 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000675 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
676 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
677 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
678 break;
679 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000680
681 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000682 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000683
684 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
685 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000686 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
687 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
688 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000689 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000690 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000691
692 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000693 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000694 (void) NI;
695
696 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
697 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
698
699 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
700 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000701}
702
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000703namespace {
704 /// ConstantIntOrdering - This class implements a stable ordering of constant
705 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
706 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
707 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
708 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
709 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
710 }
711 };
712}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000713
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000714static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
715 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
716 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
717 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000718 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
719 return 1;
720 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
721 return 0;
722 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000723}
724
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000725static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
726 MDNode* ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
727 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
728 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
729 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
730
731 return false;
732}
733
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000734/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
735/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
736/// metadata.
737static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
738 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
739 MDNode* MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
740 assert(MD);
741 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000742 ConstantInt *CI = cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000743 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000744 }
745
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000746 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
747 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
748 // default weight to be the first entry.
749 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
750 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
751 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
752 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
753 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000754 }
755}
756
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000757/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000758static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000759 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
760 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
761 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
762 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
763 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000764 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000765}
766
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000767/// FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors - The specified terminator is a value
768/// equality comparison instruction (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
769/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
770/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000771bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
772 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000773 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
774 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
775 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
776 bool Changed = false;
777
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000778 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000779 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000780 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000781
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000782 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
783 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
784 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
785
786 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
787 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000788 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000789 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
790
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000791 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000792 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
793
794 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
795 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
796 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000797 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000798
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000799 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
800 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000801 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
802 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
803
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000804 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000805 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000806 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000807 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
808 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
809 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000810 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
811 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
812 // successor's weights
813 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000814
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000815 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000816 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000817 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000818 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000819 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
820 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
821 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000822 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000823
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000824 if (PredDefault == BB) {
825 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
826 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000827 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
828 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
829 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
830 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
831 else {
832 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
833 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000834
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000835 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
836 // Increase weight for the default case.
837 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000838 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
839 Weights.pop_back();
840 }
841
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000842 PredCases.pop_back();
843 --i; --e;
844 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000845
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000847 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
848 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
849 PredDefault = BBDefault;
850 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
851 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000852
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000853 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
854 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000855 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
856 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
857 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
858 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
859 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000860 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
861 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
862 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
863 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
864 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
865 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000866 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000867 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000868
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000869 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
870 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
871 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
872 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
873 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
874 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
875 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
876 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000877 } else {
878 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
879 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
880 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000881 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000882 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000883 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
884 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
885 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000886
887 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
888 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
889 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
890 Weights.pop_back();
891 }
892
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000893 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
894 PredCases.pop_back();
895 --i; --e;
896 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000897
898 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
899 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000900 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
901 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
902 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000903 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
904 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000905 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
906 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
907 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
908 }
909
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000910 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
911 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000912 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000913 PTIHandled.begin(),
914 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000915 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
916 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000917 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000918 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000919 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000920 }
921
922 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
923 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
924 // successors.
925 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSuccessors.size(); i != e; ++i)
926 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessors[i], Pred, BB);
927
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000928 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000929 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000930 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000931 assert(DL && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout");
932 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL->getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000933 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000934 }
935
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000936 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000937 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
938 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000939 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000940 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
941 NewSI->addCase(PredCases[i].Value, PredCases[i].Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000942
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000943 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
944 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
945 FitWeights(Weights);
946
947 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
948
949 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
950 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
951 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
952 }
953
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000954 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000955
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
957 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
958 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000959 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000960 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
961 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000962 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000963 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000964 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000965 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
966 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +0000967 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000968 }
969 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
970 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000971
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000972 Changed = true;
973 }
974 }
975 return Changed;
976}
977
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000978// isSafeToHoistInvoke - If we would need to insert a select that uses the
979// value of this invoke (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we
980// would need to do this), we can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere
981// to put the select in this case.
982static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
983 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000984 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000985 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000986 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000987 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
988 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
989 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
990 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
991 return false;
992 }
993 }
994 }
995 return true;
996}
997
Chris Lattnerd683bdd2005-08-03 17:59:45 +0000998/// HoistThenElseCodeToIf - Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000999/// BB2, hoist any common code in the two blocks up into the branch block. The
1000/// caller of this function guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001001static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001002 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1003 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1004 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1005 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1006 // identical order.
1007 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1008 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1009
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001010 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1011 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1012
1013 Instruction *I1 = BB1_Itr++, *I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001014 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1015 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1016 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1017 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1018 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1019 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1020 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1021 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1022 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001023 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001024 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001025 return false;
1026
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001027 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001028
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001029 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001030 do {
1031 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1032 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1033 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1034 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001035
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001036 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1037 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1038 // the now redundant second instruction.
1039 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1040 if (!I2->use_empty())
1041 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001042 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001043 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001044 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001045
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001046 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001047 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001048 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1049 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1050 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1051 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1052 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1053 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1054 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1055 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1056 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001057 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001058
1059 return true;
1060
1061HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001062 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1063 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001064 return Changed;
1065
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001066 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001067 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001068 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001069 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1070 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1071 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1072 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1073 continue;
1074
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001075 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V, DL))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001076 return Changed;
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001077 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V, DL))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001078 return Changed;
1079 }
1080 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001081
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001082 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001083 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001084 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI, NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001085 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001086 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1087 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001088 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001089 }
1090
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001091 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001092 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1093 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1094 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1095 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1096 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001097 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001098 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001099 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001100 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001101 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1102 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001103 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001104
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001105 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1106 // that determines the right value.
1107 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001108 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001109 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1110 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1111 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1112
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001113 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1114 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1115 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1116 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001117 }
1118 }
1119
1120 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001121 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1122 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001123
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001124 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001125 return true;
1126}
1127
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001128/// SinkThenElseCodeToEnd - Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
1129/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1130/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1131/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1132static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1133 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1134 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1135 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1136
1137 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1138 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001139 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1140 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1141 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001142 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001143 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1144 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1145 return false;
1146 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001147 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1148 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1149 return false;
1150
1151 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
1152 std::map<Value*, std::pair<Value*, PHINode*> > MapValueFromBB1ToBB2;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001153 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001154 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end();
1155 I != E; ++I) {
1156 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1157 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001158 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001159 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[BB1V] = std::make_pair(BB2V, PN);
1160 } else {
1161 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1162 break;
1163 }
1164 }
1165 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1166 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001167
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001168
1169 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1170 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1171 // instructions in an identical order.
1172 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
1173 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(), RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1174 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1175 // Skip debug info.
1176 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1177 if (RI1 == RE1)
1178 return false;
1179 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1180 if (RI2 == RE2)
1181 return false;
1182 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1183 ++RI1;
1184 ++RI2;
1185
1186 bool Changed = false;
1187 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1188 // Skip debug info.
1189 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1190 if (RI1 == RE1)
1191 return Changed;
1192 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1193 if (RI2 == RE2)
1194 return Changed;
1195
1196 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
1197 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1198 // perform the same operation.
1199 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1200 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1201 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
1202 isa<LandingPadInst>(I1) || isa<LandingPadInst>(I2) ||
1203 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1204 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1205 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1206 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
1207 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1) == MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() ||
1208 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].first != I2)
1209 return Changed;
1210
1211 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
1212 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1213 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1214 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1215 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1216 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1217 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1218 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1219 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1220 SwapOpnds = true;
1221 }
1222 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1223 if (SwapOpnds)
1224 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1225 return Changed;
1226 }
1227
1228 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1229 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1230 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001231 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001232 unsigned Op1Idx = 0;
1233 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1234 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1235 continue;
1236 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or
1237 // the different operand is already in MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.
1238 // Early exit if we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1239 if (DifferentOp1 ||
1240 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1->getOperand(I)) !=
1241 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() ||
1242 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1243 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1244 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1245 if (SwapOpnds)
1246 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1247 return Changed;
1248 }
1249 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1250 Op1Idx = I;
1251 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1252 }
1253
1254 // We insert the pair of different operands to MapValueFromBB1ToBB2 and
1255 // remove (I1, I2) from MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.
1256 if (DifferentOp1) {
1257 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
1258 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink",
1259 BBEnd->begin());
1260 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[DifferentOp1] = std::make_pair(DifferentOp2, NewPN);
1261 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1262 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
1263 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1264 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1265 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1266 }
1267 PHINode *OldPN = MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].second;
1268 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.erase(I1);
1269
1270 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n";);
1271 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n";);
1272 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1273 // instruction in the basic block down.
1274 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1275 // Sink the instruction.
1276 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1277 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1278 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1279 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1280
1281 if (!I2->use_empty())
1282 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1283 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
1284 I2->eraseFromParent();
1285
1286 if (UpdateRE1)
1287 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1288 if (UpdateRE2)
1289 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1290 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = I1;
1291 NumSinkCommons++;
1292 Changed = true;
1293 }
1294 return Changed;
1295}
1296
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001297/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1298/// conditional block.
1299///
1300/// We are looking for code like the following:
1301/// BrBB:
1302/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1303/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1304/// ... // function).
1305/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1306/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1307/// ThenBB:
1308/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1309/// br label EndBB
1310/// EndBB:
1311/// ...
1312/// We are going to transform this into:
1313/// BrBB:
1314/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1315/// ... //
1316/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1317/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1318/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1319/// ...
1320///
1321/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1322/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001323static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1324 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001325 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1326 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001327 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001328
1329 // Volatile or atomic.
1330 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001331 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001332
1333 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1334
1335 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1336 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1337 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1338 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1339 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1340
1341 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1342 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001343 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001344
1345 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1346 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1347 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1348 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1349 return SI->getValueOperand();
1350 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001351 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001352 }
1353
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001354 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001355}
1356
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001357/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001358///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001359/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1360/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1361/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1362/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1363/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1364///
1365/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1366/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1367/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1368/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1369///
1370///
1371/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1372/// \code
1373/// BB:
1374/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1375/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1376/// ThenBB:
1377/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001378/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001379/// EndBB:
1380/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1381/// ...
1382/// \endcode
1383///
1384/// Into this IR:
1385/// \code
1386/// BB:
1387/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1388/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1389/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1390/// ...
1391/// \endcode
1392///
1393/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001394static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
1395 const DataLayout *DL) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001396 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1397 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1398 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1399 return false;
1400
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001401 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1402 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1403
1404 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1405 // to swap the select operands later.
1406 bool Invert = false;
1407 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1408 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1409 Invert = true;
1410 }
1411 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1412
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001413 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1414 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1415 // - They are defined in BB, and
1416 // - They have no side effects, and
1417 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1418 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1419
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001420 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001421 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1422 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001423 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001424 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001425 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
1426 Instruction *I = BBI;
1427 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001428 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1429 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001430
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001431 // Only speculatively execution a single instruction (not counting the
1432 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001433 ++SpeculationCost;
1434 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001435 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001436
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001437 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001438 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL) &&
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001439 !(HoistCondStores &&
1440 (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(I, BB, ThenBB,
1441 EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001442 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001443 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001444 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, DL) > PHINodeFoldingThreshold)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001445 return false;
1446
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001447 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1448 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1449 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1450
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001451 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001452 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001453 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001454 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001455 i != e; ++i) {
1456 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001457 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1458 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1459 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1460
1461 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001462 }
1463 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001464
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001465 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1466 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1467 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1468 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1469 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1470 I != E; ++I)
1471 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001472 ++SpeculationCost;
1473 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001474 return false;
1475 }
1476
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001477 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1478 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001479 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001480 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001481 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1482 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001483
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001484 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001485 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001486 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001487 continue;
1488
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001489 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001490 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1491 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1492 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001493 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1494
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001495 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE, DL)) ||
1496 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE, DL)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001497 return false;
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001498 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, DL) : 0;
1499 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, DL) : 0;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001500 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001501 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001502
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001503 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1504 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1505 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001506 // constant expression.
1507 ++SpeculationCost;
1508 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001509 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001510 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001511
1512 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1513 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001514 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001515 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001516
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001517 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001518 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001519
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001520 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1521 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1522 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1523 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1524 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1525 if (Invert)
1526 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1527 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1528 "." + FalseV->getName());
1529 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1530 }
1531
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001532 // Hoist the instructions.
1533 BB->getInstList().splice(BI, ThenBB->getInstList(), ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001534 std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001535
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001536 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001537 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001538 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1539 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1540 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1541 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1542 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1543 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1544
1545 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1546 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1547 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001548
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001549 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001550 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1551 // destinations were inverted.
1552 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001553 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001554 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1555 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1556 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1557 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1558 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001559 }
1560
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001561 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001562 return true;
1563}
1564
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001565/// \returns True if this block contains a CallInst with the NoDuplicate
1566/// attribute.
1567static bool HasNoDuplicateCall(const BasicBlock *BB) {
1568 for (BasicBlock::const_iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) {
1569 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I);
1570 if (!CI)
1571 continue;
1572 if (CI->cannotDuplicate())
1573 return true;
1574 }
1575 return false;
1576}
1577
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001578/// BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough - Return true if we can thread a branch
1579/// across this block.
1580static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1581 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001582 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001583
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001584 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001585 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1586 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001587 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001588 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001589
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001590 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001591 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001592 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1593 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1594 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001595 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001596
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001597 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1598 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001599
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001600 return true;
1601}
1602
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001603/// FoldCondBranchOnPHI - If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value
1604/// that is defined in the same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are
1605/// constants, thread edges corresponding to that entry to be branches to their
1606/// ultimate destination.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001607static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001608 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1609 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001610 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1611 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001612 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1613 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001614
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001615 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1616 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001617 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001618 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001619 }
1620
1621 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001622 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001623
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001624 if (HasNoDuplicateCall(BB)) return false;
1625
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001626 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1627 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001628 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001629 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001630 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001631
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001632 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1633 // branch to RealDest.
1634 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1635 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001636
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001637 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001638 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1639 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001640
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001641 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1642 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1643 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1644 // the edge we are about to create.
1645 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1646 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1647 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1648 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001649
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001650 // Update PHI nodes.
1651 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001652
1653 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1654 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1655 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1656 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1657 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1658 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1659 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1660 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1661 continue;
1662 }
1663 // Clone the instruction.
1664 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1665 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001666
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001667 // Update operands due to translation.
1668 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1669 i != e; ++i) {
1670 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1671 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1672 *i = PI->second;
1673 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001674
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001675 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001676 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001677 TranslateMap[BBI] = V;
1678 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001679 } else {
1680 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1681 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1682 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1683 TranslateMap[BBI] = N;
1684 }
1685 }
1686
1687 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1688 // to EdgeBB instead.
1689 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1690 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1691 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1692 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1693 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1694 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001695
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001696 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001697 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001698 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001699
1700 return false;
1701}
1702
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001703/// FoldTwoEntryPHINode - Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry
1704/// PHI node, see if we can eliminate it.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001705static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001706 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1707 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1708 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1709 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1710 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1711 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001712 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1713 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1714 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001715 if (!IfCond ||
1716 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1717 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1718 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001719
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001720 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1721 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1722 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1723 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1724 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1725 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1726 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1727 if (NumPhis > 2)
1728 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001729
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001730 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1731 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1732 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001733 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001734 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1735 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001736
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001737 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1738 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001739 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001740 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001741 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001742 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001743 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001744
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001745 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001746 MaxCostVal0, DL) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001747 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001748 MaxCostVal1, DL))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001749 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001750 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001751
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001752 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001753 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1754 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001755 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001756
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001757 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1758 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1759 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1760 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1761 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1762 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1763 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001764
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001765 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1766 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1767 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1768 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001769 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001770 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1771 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1772 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001773 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001774 } else {
1775 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1776 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001777 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001778 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1779 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1780 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1781 return false;
1782 }
1783 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001784
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001785 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001786 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001787 } else {
1788 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1789 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001790 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001791 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1792 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1793 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1794 return false;
1795 }
1796 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001797
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001798 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001799 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001800
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001801 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1802 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001803 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001804 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001805
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001806 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1807 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001808 if (IfBlock1)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001809 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001810 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001811 IfBlock1->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001812 if (IfBlock2)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001813 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001814 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001815 IfBlock2->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001816
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001817 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1818 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001819 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1820 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001821
1822 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001823 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001824 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1825 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001826 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001827 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001828
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001829 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1830 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1831 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1832 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001833 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1834 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001835 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001836 return true;
1837}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001838
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001839/// SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns - If we found a conditional branch that goes
1840/// to two returning blocks, try to merge them together into one return,
1841/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001842static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001843 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001844 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1845 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1846 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1847 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1848 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001849
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001850 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1851 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1852 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001853 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001854 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001855 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001856 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001857
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001858 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001859 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1860 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1861 // branch into a return.
1862 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1863 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1864 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001865 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001866 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001867 return true;
1868 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001869
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001870 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1871 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1872 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1873 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001874
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001875 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1876 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1877 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1878 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
1879 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
1880 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
1881 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001882
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001883 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
1884 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
1885 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
1886 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
1887 // safe.
1888 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
1889 if (TCV->canTrap())
1890 return false;
1891 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
1892 if (FCV->canTrap())
1893 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001894
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001895 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
1896 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
1897 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1898 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001899
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001900 // Insert select instructions where needed.
1901 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001902 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001903 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001904 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
1905 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
1906 TrueValue = FalseValue;
1907 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001908 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
1909 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001910 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001911 }
1912
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001913 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001914 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
1915
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00001916 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001917
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00001918 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00001919 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
1920 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001921
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001922 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
1923
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001924 return true;
1925}
1926
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001927/// ExtractBranchMetadata - Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the
1928/// probabilities of the branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt
1929/// parameters and return true, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was
1930/// found.
1931static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00001932 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001933 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
1934 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
1935 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Nick Lewycky398255e2011-12-27 18:27:22 +00001936 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001937 ConstantInt *CITrue = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
1938 ConstantInt *CIFalse = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Nick Lewycky398255e2011-12-27 18:27:22 +00001939 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00001940 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
1941 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001942 return true;
1943}
1944
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001945/// checkCSEInPredecessor - Return true if the given instruction is available
1946/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
1947///
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00001948static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001949 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
1950 return false;
1951 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
1952 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
1953 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
1954 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
1955 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
1956 Inst->eraseFromParent();
1957 return true;
1958 }
1959 }
1960 return false;
1961}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00001962
Chris Lattner7d4cdae2011-04-11 23:24:57 +00001963/// FoldBranchToCommonDest - If this basic block is simple enough, and if a
1964/// predecessor branches to us and one of our successors, fold the block into
1965/// the predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001966bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001967 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001968
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001969 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001970 if (BI->isConditional())
1971 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
1972 else {
1973 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
1974 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
1975 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
1976 // predecessor.
1977 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
1978 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
1979 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
1980 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
1981 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
1982 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
1983 I != E; ) {
1984 Instruction *Curr = I++;
1985 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
1986 Cond = Curr;
1987 break;
1988 }
1989 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
1990 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
1991 return false;
1992 }
1993 }
1994
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001995 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001996 return false;
1997 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001998
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001999 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2000 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002001 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002002
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002003 // Only allow this if the condition is a simple instruction that can be
2004 // executed unconditionally. It must be in the same block as the branch, and
2005 // must be at the front of the block.
Devang Patel916fdce2009-02-04 21:39:48 +00002006 BasicBlock::iterator FrontIt = BB->front();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002007
Devang Patel916fdce2009-02-04 21:39:48 +00002008 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002009 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(FrontIt)) ++FrontIt;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00002010
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002011 // Allow a single instruction to be hoisted in addition to the compare
2012 // that feeds the branch. We later ensure that any values that _it_ uses
2013 // were also live in the predecessor, so that we don't unnecessarily create
2014 // register pressure or inhibit out-of-order execution.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002015 Instruction *BonusInst = nullptr;
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002016 if (&*FrontIt != Cond &&
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002017 FrontIt->hasOneUse() && FrontIt->user_back() == Cond &&
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00002018 isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(FrontIt, DL)) {
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002019 BonusInst = &*FrontIt;
2020 ++FrontIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002021
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002022 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2023 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(FrontIt)) ++FrontIt;
Devang Patelbc3d8b22011-04-07 23:11:25 +00002024 }
2025
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002026 // Only a single bonus inst is allowed.
2027 if (&*FrontIt != Cond)
2028 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002029
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002030 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
2031 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = Cond; ++CondIt;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002032
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002033 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002034 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002035
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002036 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002037 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002038
2039 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2040 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2041 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2042 if (CE->canTrap())
2043 return false;
2044 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2045 if (CE->canTrap())
2046 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002047
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002048 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2049 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002050 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002051 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2052 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002053
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002054 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2055 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002056 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002057
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002058 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2059 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2060 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002061 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002062 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002063 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002064 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2065 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2066 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002067 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002068
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002069 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002070 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002071 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002072
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002073 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2074 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2075 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2076 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2077 Opc = Instruction::And;
2078 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2079 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2080 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2081 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2082 else
2083 continue;
2084 } else {
2085 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2086 continue;
2087 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002088
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002089 // Ensure that any values used in the bonus instruction are also used
2090 // by the terminator of the predecessor. This means that those values
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002091 // must already have been resolved, so we won't be inhibiting the
Nadav Rotem53d32212013-11-12 22:37:16 +00002092 // out-of-order core by speculating them earlier. We also allow
2093 // instructions that are used by the terminator's condition because it
2094 // exposes more merging opportunities.
2095 bool UsedByBranch = (BonusInst && BonusInst->hasOneUse() &&
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002096 BonusInst->user_back() == Cond);
Nadav Rotem53d32212013-11-12 22:37:16 +00002097
2098 if (BonusInst && !UsedByBranch) {
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002099 // Collect the values used by the bonus inst
2100 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 4> UsedValues;
2101 for (Instruction::op_iterator OI = BonusInst->op_begin(),
2102 OE = BonusInst->op_end(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00002103 Value *V = *OI;
Nadav Rotem5ba1c6c2013-11-10 04:13:31 +00002104 if (!isa<Constant>(V) && !isa<Argument>(V))
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002105 UsedValues.insert(V);
2106 }
2107
2108 SmallVector<std::pair<Value*, unsigned>, 4> Worklist;
2109 Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(PBI->getOperand(0), 0));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002110
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002111 // Walk up to four levels back up the use-def chain of the predecessor's
2112 // terminator to see if all those values were used. The choice of four
2113 // levels is arbitrary, to provide a compile-time-cost bound.
2114 while (!Worklist.empty()) {
2115 std::pair<Value*, unsigned> Pair = Worklist.back();
2116 Worklist.pop_back();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002117
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002118 if (Pair.second >= 4) continue;
2119 UsedValues.erase(Pair.first);
2120 if (UsedValues.empty()) break;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002121
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002122 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Pair.first)) {
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002123 for (Instruction::op_iterator OI = I->op_begin(), OE = I->op_end();
2124 OI != OE; ++OI)
2125 Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(OI->get(), Pair.second+1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002126 }
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002127 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002128
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002129 if (!UsedValues.empty()) return false;
2130 }
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002131
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002132 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002133 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002134
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002135 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2136 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002137 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002138
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002139 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2140 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2141 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2142 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002143 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002144 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002145 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002146
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002147 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002148 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002149 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002150
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002151 // If we have a bonus inst, clone it into the predecessor block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002152 Instruction *NewBonus = nullptr;
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002153 if (BonusInst) {
2154 NewBonus = BonusInst->clone();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002155
2156 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2157 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2158 // only given the branch precondition.
2159 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2160 // semantics we don't understand.
2161 NewBonus->dropUnknownMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_dbg);
2162
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002163 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, NewBonus);
2164 NewBonus->takeName(BonusInst);
2165 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName()+".old");
2166 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002167
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002168 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2169 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002170 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002171 if (BonusInst) New->replaceUsesOfWith(BonusInst, NewBonus);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002172 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, New);
2173 New->takeName(Cond);
2174 Cond->setName(New->getName()+".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002175
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002176 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002177 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002178 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002179 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002180 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2181
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002182 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
2183 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2184 PredFalseWeight);
2185 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2186 SuccFalseWeight);
2187 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2188
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002189 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002190 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2191 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2192 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2193 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2194 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2195 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2196 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2197 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2198 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2199 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2200 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2201 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002202 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2203 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2204 }
2205 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002206 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2207 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2208 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2209 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2210 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2211 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2212 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2213 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2214 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2215 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002216 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2217 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2218 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002219 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2220 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2221 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2222
2223 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2224 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2225 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2226 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2227 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002228 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002229 } else {
2230 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2231 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002232 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002233 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2234 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002235 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002236 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2237 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2238 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2239 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2240 Instruction *NotCond =
2241 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2242 "not.cond"));
2243 MergedCond =
2244 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2245 NotCond, New,
2246 "and.cond"));
2247 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2248 MergedCond =
2249 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2250 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2251 "or.cond"));
2252 } else {
2253 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2254 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2255 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002256 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002257 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2258 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2259 "and.cond"));
2260 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2261 Instruction *NotCond =
2262 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2263 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002264 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002265 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2266 NotCond, MergedCond,
2267 "or.cond"));
2268 }
2269 }
2270 // Update PHI Node.
2271 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2272 MergedCond);
2273 }
2274 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2275 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2276 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2277 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002278 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002279
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002280 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2281 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2282
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002283 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2284 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2285 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2286 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002287
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002288 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002289 }
2290 return false;
2291}
2292
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002293/// SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch - If we have a conditional branch as a
2294/// predecessor of another block, this function tries to simplify it. We know
2295/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2296/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
2297static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI) {
2298 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2299 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002300
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002301 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002302 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002303 // this conditional branch redundant.
2304 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2305 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2306 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2307 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2308 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2309 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2310 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002311 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002312 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002313 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2314 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002315
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002316 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2317 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2318 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2319 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002320 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002321 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Jay Foad52131342011-03-30 11:28:46 +00002322 std::distance(PB, PE),
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002323 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr",
2324 BB->begin());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002325 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2326 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2327 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002328 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002329 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2330 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002331 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2332 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2333 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2334 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002335 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002336 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002337 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002338 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002339 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002340 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002341
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002342 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002343 return true;
2344 }
2345 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002346
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002347 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002348 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002349 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002350 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2351 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2352 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2353 ++BBI;
2354 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002355 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002356
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002357
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002358 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2359 if (CE->canTrap())
2360 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002361
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002362 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2363 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2364 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2365 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2366 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2367 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2368 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2369 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2370 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2371 else
2372 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002373
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002374 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2375 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2376 // keep getting unwound.
2377 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2378 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002379
2380 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002381 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2382 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002383
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002384 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2385 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2386 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2387
2388 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002389 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2390 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002391 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002392 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2393 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002394
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002395 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2396 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2397 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2398 if (CE->canTrap())
2399 return false;
2400
2401 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2402 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2403 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2404 if (CE->canTrap())
2405 return false;
2406 }
2407
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002408 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002409 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002410
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002411 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002412 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002413
2414
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002415 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2416 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2417 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2418 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2419 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2420 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2421 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2422 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2423 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2424 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002425 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2426 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002427 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2428 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002429 }
2430
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002431 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002432
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002433 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2434 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002435
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002436 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2437 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002438 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002439 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002440 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2441
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002442 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2443 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002444 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2445
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002446 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002447 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002448
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002449 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2450 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2451 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2452 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002453
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002454 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2455 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
2456 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2457 PredFalseWeight);
2458 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2459 SuccFalseWeight);
2460 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2461 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2462 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2463 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2464 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2465 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2466 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2467 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
2468 SmallVector<uint64_t, 2> NewWeights;
2469 NewWeights.push_back(PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2470 PredOther * SuccCommon);
2471 NewWeights.push_back(PredOther * SuccOther);
2472 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2473 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2474
2475 SmallVector<uint32_t, 2> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2476 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2477 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2478 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2479 }
2480
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002481 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2482 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002483 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002484
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002485 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2486 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2487 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2488 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002489 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002490 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2491 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2492 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2493 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2494 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2495 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2496 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002497 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2498 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002499 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002500 }
2501 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002502
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002503 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2504 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002505
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002506 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2507 // one fewer predecessor.
2508 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002509}
2510
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002511// SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect - Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a
2512// branch to TrueBB if Cond is true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
2513// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2514// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2515// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2516static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002517 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2518 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2519 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002520 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2521 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2522 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2523 // successor.
2524 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002525 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002526
2527 // Then remove the rest.
2528 for (unsigned I = 0, E = OldTerm->getNumSuccessors(); I != E; ++I) {
2529 BasicBlock *Succ = OldTerm->getSuccessor(I);
2530 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2531 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002532 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002533 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002534 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002535 else
2536 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent());
2537 }
2538
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002539 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2540 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2541
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002542 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002543 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002544 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2545 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2546 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002547 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002548 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002549 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2550 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002551 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2552 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2553 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2554 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2555 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2556 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002557 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2558 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2559 // terminator must be unreachable.
2560 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2561 } else {
2562 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2563 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2564 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002565 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002566 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002567 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002568 else
2569 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002570 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002571 }
2572
2573 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2574 return true;
2575}
2576
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002577// SimplifySwitchOnSelect - Replaces
2578// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2579// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2580// unconditional otherwise.
2581static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2582 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2583 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2584 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2585 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2586 return false;
2587
2588 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2589 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002590 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2591 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002592
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002593 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2594 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2595 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2596 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2597 if (HasWeights) {
2598 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2599 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2600 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2601 getSuccessorIndex()];
2602 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2603 getSuccessorIndex()];
2604 }
2605 }
2606
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002607 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002608 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2609 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002610}
2611
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002612// SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect - Replaces
2613// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
2614// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
2615// with
2616// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
2617static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
2618 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
2619 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
2620 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
2621 if (!TBA || !FBA)
2622 return false;
2623
2624 // Extract the actual blocks.
2625 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
2626 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
2627
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002628 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002629 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
2630 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002631}
2632
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002633/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt - This is called when we find an icmp
2634/// instruction (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
2635/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
2636/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
2637/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
2638/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
2639/// like:
2640///
2641/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
2642/// DEFAULT:
2643/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
2644/// br label %end
2645/// end:
2646/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002647///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002648/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
2649/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00002650static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
2651 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002652 const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002653 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002654
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002655 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
2656 // complex.
2657 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
2658
2659 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
2660 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002661
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002662 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
2663 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
2664 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
2665 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002666 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002667
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002668 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
2669 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
2670 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002671
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002672 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
2673 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
2674 // away.
2675 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
2676 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
2677 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
2678 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002679
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002680 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002681 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002682 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2683 }
2684 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002685 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002686 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002687
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002688 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
2689 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
2690 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00002691 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002692 Value *V;
2693 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2694 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2695 else
2696 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002697
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002698 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2699 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2700 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002701 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002702 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002703
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002704 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
2705 // the block.
2706 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002707 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002708 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002709 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
2710 return false;
2711
2712 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
2713 // true in the PHI.
2714 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
2715 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2716
2717 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2718 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
2719
2720 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
2721 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
2722 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
2723 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2724
2725 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
2726 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
2727 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
2728 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00002729 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2730 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2731 if (HasWeights) {
2732 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2733 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2734 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
2735 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
2736 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
2737
2738 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
2739 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2740 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
2741 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2742 }
2743 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002744 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002745
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002746 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002747 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
2748 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
2749 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002750 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
2751 return true;
2752}
2753
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002754/// SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain - The specified branch is a conditional branch.
2755/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
2756/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002757static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL,
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002758 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002759 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002760 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002761
2762
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002763 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
2764 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
2765 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002766 Value *CompVal = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002767 std::vector<ConstantInt*> Values;
2768 bool TrueWhenEqual = true;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002769 Value *ExtraCase = nullptr;
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002770 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002771
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002772 if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002773 CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, DL, true,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002774 UsedICmps);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002775 } else if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002776 CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, DL, false,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002777 UsedICmps);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002778 TrueWhenEqual = false;
2779 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002780
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002781 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002782 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002783
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002784 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
2785 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
2786 return false;
2787
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002788 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
2789 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
2790 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
2791 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002792
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002793 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
2794 // transformation. A switch with one value is just an cond branch.
2795 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002796
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00002797 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
2798 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
2799
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002800 // Figure out which block is which destination.
2801 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2802 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2803 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002804
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002805 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002806
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002807 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002808 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002809
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002810 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
2811 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
2812 // right before the condbr to handle it.
2813 if (ExtraCase) {
2814 BasicBlock *NewBB = BB->splitBasicBlock(BI, "switch.early.test");
2815 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
2816 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002817 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2818
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002819 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002820 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002821 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002822 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002823
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002824 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002825
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00002826 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
2827 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002828 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002829
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002830 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
2831 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002832 BB = NewBB;
2833 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002834
2835 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002836 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
2837 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002838 assert(DL && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout");
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002839 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CompVal,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002840 DL->getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()),
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002841 "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002842 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002843
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002844 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002845 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00002846
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002847 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
2848 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
2849 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002850
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002851 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
2852 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
2853 // the number of edges added.
2854 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
2855 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
2856 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
2857 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2858 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
2859 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
2860 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002861
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002862 // Erase the old branch instruction.
2863 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002864
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002865 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002866 return true;
2867}
2868
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002869bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
2870 // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught
2871 // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls.
2872 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2873 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
2874 if (RI->getValue() != LPInst)
2875 // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that
2876 // caused control to branch here.
2877 return false;
2878
2879 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
2880 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst, E = RI;
2881 while (++I != E)
2882 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2883 return false;
2884
2885 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002886 bool InvokeRequiresTableEntry = false;
2887 bool Changed = false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002888 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
2889 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>((*PI++)->getTerminator());
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002890
2891 if (II->hasFnAttr(Attribute::UWTable)) {
2892 // Don't remove an `invoke' instruction if the ABI requires an entry into
2893 // the table.
2894 InvokeRequiresTableEntry = true;
2895 continue;
2896 }
2897
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002898 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end() - 3);
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002899
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002900 // Insert a call instruction before the invoke.
2901 CallInst *Call = CallInst::Create(II->getCalledValue(), Args, "", II);
2902 Call->takeName(II);
2903 Call->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
2904 Call->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
2905 Call->setDebugLoc(II->getDebugLoc());
2906
2907 // Anything that used the value produced by the invoke instruction now uses
2908 // the value produced by the call instruction. Note that we do this even
2909 // for void functions and calls with no uses so that the callgraph edge is
2910 // updated.
2911 II->replaceAllUsesWith(Call);
2912 BB->removePredecessor(II->getParent());
2913
2914 // Insert a branch to the normal destination right before the invoke.
2915 BranchInst::Create(II->getNormalDest(), II);
2916
2917 // Finally, delete the invoke instruction!
2918 II->eraseFromParent();
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002919 Changed = true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002920 }
2921
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002922 if (!InvokeRequiresTableEntry)
2923 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
2924 BB->eraseFromParent();
2925
2926 return Changed;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002927}
2928
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002929bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002930 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2931 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002932
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002933 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
2934 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
2935 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002936 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2937 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002938 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
2939 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
2940 if (BI->isUnconditional())
2941 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
2942 else
2943 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
2944 }
2945 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002946
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002947 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002948 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002949 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2950 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
2951 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
2952 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002953 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002954 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002955
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002956 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
2957 if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB))
2958 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
2959 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002960
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002961 return true;
2962 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002963
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002964 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
2965 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
2966 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
2967 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2968 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002969
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002970 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
2971 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
2972 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002973 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002974 return true;
2975 }
2976 return false;
2977}
2978
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002979bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
2980 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002981
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002982 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002983
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002984 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
2985 // be removed, do so.
2986 while (UI != BB->begin()) {
2987 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI;
2988 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00002989 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
2990 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
2991 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002992 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00002993
2994 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2995 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
2996 if (SI->isVolatile())
2997 break;
2998 } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
2999 if (LI->isVolatile())
3000 break;
3001 } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
3002 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3003 break;
3004 } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
3005 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3006 break;
3007 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3008 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003009 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003010 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003011 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3012 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3013 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3014 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003015 }
3016
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003017 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3018 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3019 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003020 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003021 Changed = true;
3022 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003023
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003024 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3025 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3026 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003027
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003028 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3029 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3030 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003031 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003032 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
3033 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3034 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3035 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3036 TI->eraseFromParent();
3037 Changed = true;
3038 }
3039 } else {
3040 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003041 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003042 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3043 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003044 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003045 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3046 Changed = true;
3047 }
3048 }
3049 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003050 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003051 i != e; ++i)
3052 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003053 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3054 SI->removeCase(i);
3055 --i; --e;
3056 Changed = true;
3057 }
3058 // If the default value is unreachable, figure out the most popular
3059 // destination and make it the default.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003060 if (SI->getDefaultDest() == BB) {
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003061 std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> > Popularity;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003062 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003063 i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00003064 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> &entry =
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003065 Popularity[i.getCaseSuccessor()];
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003066 if (entry.first == 0) {
3067 entry.first = 1;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003068 entry.second = i.getCaseIndex();
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003069 } else {
3070 entry.first++;
3071 }
3072 }
3073
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003074 // Find the most popular block.
3075 unsigned MaxPop = 0;
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003076 unsigned MaxIndex = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003077 BasicBlock *MaxBlock = nullptr;
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003078 for (std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> >::iterator
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003079 I = Popularity.begin(), E = Popularity.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003080 if (I->second.first > MaxPop ||
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003081 (I->second.first == MaxPop && MaxIndex > I->second.second)) {
3082 MaxPop = I->second.first;
3083 MaxIndex = I->second.second;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003084 MaxBlock = I->first;
3085 }
3086 }
3087 if (MaxBlock) {
3088 // Make this the new default, allowing us to delete any explicit
3089 // edges to it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003090 SI->setDefaultDest(MaxBlock);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003091 Changed = true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003092
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003093 // If MaxBlock has phinodes in it, remove MaxPop-1 entries from
3094 // it.
3095 if (isa<PHINode>(MaxBlock->begin()))
3096 for (unsigned i = 0; i != MaxPop-1; ++i)
3097 MaxBlock->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003098
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003099 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003100 i != e; ++i)
3101 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == MaxBlock) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003102 SI->removeCase(i);
3103 --i; --e;
3104 }
3105 }
3106 }
3107 } else if (InvokeInst *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3108 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3109 // Convert the invoke to a call instruction. This would be a good
3110 // place to note that the call does not throw though.
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003111 BranchInst *BI = Builder.CreateBr(II->getNormalDest());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003112 II->removeFromParent(); // Take out of symbol table
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003113
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003114 // Insert the call now...
3115 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end()-3);
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003116 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
3117 CallInst *CI = Builder.CreateCall(II->getCalledValue(),
Jay Foad5bd375a2011-07-15 08:37:34 +00003118 Args, II->getName());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003119 CI->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
3120 CI->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
3121 // If the invoke produced a value, the call does now instead.
3122 II->replaceAllUsesWith(CI);
3123 delete II;
3124 Changed = true;
3125 }
3126 }
3127 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003128
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003129 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
3130 if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) &&
3131 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3132 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3133 BB->eraseFromParent();
3134 return true;
3135 }
3136
3137 return Changed;
3138}
3139
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003140/// TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp - Turns a switch with that contains only a
3141/// integer range comparison into a sub, an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003142static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003143 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003144
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003145 // Make sure all cases point to the same destination and gather the values.
3146 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> Cases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003147 SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003148 Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3149 SwitchInst::CaseIt PrevI = I++;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003150 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); I != E; PrevI = I++) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003151 if (PrevI.getCaseSuccessor() != I.getCaseSuccessor())
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003152 return false;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003153 Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003154 }
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003155 assert(Cases.size() == SI->getNumCases() && "Not all cases gathered");
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003156
3157 // Sort the case values, then check if they form a range we can transform.
3158 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3159 for (unsigned I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3160 if (Cases[I-1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue()+1)
3161 return false;
3162 }
3163
3164 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(Cases.back());
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003165 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), SI->getNumCases());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003166
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003167 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3168 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Devang Patel3015a542011-05-19 00:13:33 +00003169 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName()+".off");
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003170 Value *Cmp;
3171 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
3172 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && SI->getNumCases() != 0)
3173 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3174 else
3175 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003176 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003177 Cmp, SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor(), SI->getDefaultDest());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003178
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003179 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
3180 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3181 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3182 if (HasWeights) {
3183 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3184 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3185 // Combine all weights for the cases to be the true weight of NewBI.
3186 // We assume that the sum of all weights for a Terminator can fit into 32
3187 // bits.
3188 uint32_t NewTrueWeight = 0;
3189 for (unsigned I = 1, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I)
3190 NewTrueWeight += (uint32_t)Weights[I];
3191 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3192 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
3193 createBranchWeights(NewTrueWeight,
3194 (uint32_t)Weights[0]));
3195 }
3196 }
3197
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003198 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successor's PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003199 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor()->begin();
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003200 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003201 for (unsigned I = 0, E = SI->getNumCases()-1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003202 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3203 }
3204 SI->eraseFromParent();
3205
3206 return true;
3207}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003208
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003209/// EliminateDeadSwitchCases - Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
3210/// and use it to remove dead cases.
3211static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI) {
3212 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003213 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003214 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Jay Foada0653a32014-05-14 21:14:37 +00003215 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003216
3217 // Gather dead cases.
3218 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003219 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003220 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3221 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3222 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003223 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003224 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003225 }
3226 }
3227
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003228 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3229 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3230 if (HasWeight) {
3231 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3232 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3233 }
3234
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003235 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3236 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003237 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003238 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003239 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003240 if (HasWeight) {
3241 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3242 Weights.pop_back();
3243 }
3244
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003245 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003246 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003247 SI->removeCase(Case);
3248 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003249 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003250 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3251 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3252 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3253 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3254 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003255
3256 return !DeadCases.empty();
3257}
3258
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003259/// FindPHIForConditionForwarding - If BB would be eligible for simplification
3260/// by TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
3261/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3262/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3263/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3264static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3265 BasicBlock *BB,
3266 int *PhiIndex) {
3267 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003268 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003269 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003270 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003271
3272 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3273 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003274 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003275
3276 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3277
3278 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3279 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3280 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3281 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3282
3283 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3284 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3285
3286 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3287 return PHI;
3288 }
3289
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003290 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003291}
3292
3293/// ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI - Try to forward the condition of a switch
3294/// instruction to a phi node dominated by the switch, if that would mean that
3295/// some of the destination blocks of the switch can be folded away.
3296/// Returns true if a change is made.
3297static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3298 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3299 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3300
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003301 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003302 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3303 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003304
3305 int PhiIndex;
3306 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3307 &PhiIndex);
3308 if (!PHI) continue;
3309
3310 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3311 }
3312
3313 bool Changed = false;
3314
3315 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3316 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3317 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003318 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003319
3320 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3321
3322 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3323 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3324 Changed = true;
3325 }
3326
3327 return Changed;
3328}
3329
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003330/// ValidLookupTableConstant - Return true if the backend will be able to handle
3331/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003332static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003333 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3334 return false;
3335 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3336 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003337
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003338 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3339 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3340
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003341 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3342 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3343 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3344 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3345 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3346}
3347
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003348/// LookupConstant - If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003349/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003350static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3351 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3352 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3353 return C;
3354 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3355}
3356
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003357/// ConstantFold - Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
3358/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3359/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003360/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003361static Constant *
3362ConstantFold(Instruction *I,
3363 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool,
3364 const DataLayout *DL) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003365 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003366 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3367 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003368 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003369 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3370 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3371 if (A->isNullValue())
3372 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003373 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003374 }
3375
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003376 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3377 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3378 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3379 COps.push_back(A);
3380 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003381 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003382 }
3383
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003384 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
3385 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3386 COps[1], DL);
3387
3388 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I->getOpcode(), I->getType(), COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003389}
3390
3391/// GetCaseResults - Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
3392/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003393/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003394/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003395static bool
3396GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI,
3397 ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3398 BasicBlock *CaseDest,
3399 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003400 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *> > &Res,
3401 const DataLayout *DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003402 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
3403 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
3404
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003405 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
3406 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
3407 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
3408 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
3409 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
3410 ++I) {
3411 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
3412 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
3413 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
3414 return false;
3415 Pred = CaseDest;
3416 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
3417 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3418 // Skip debug intrinsic.
3419 continue;
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003420 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(I, ConstantPool, DL)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003421 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
3422 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(I, C));
3423 } else {
3424 break;
3425 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003426 }
3427
3428 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
3429 if (!*CommonDest)
3430 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
3431 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
3432 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
3433 return false;
3434
3435 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
3436 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
3437 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3438 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
3439 if (Idx == -1)
3440 continue;
3441
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003442 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
3443 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003444 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003445 return false;
3446
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003447 // Note: If the constant comes from constant-propagating the case value
3448 // through the CaseDest basic block, it will be safe to remove the
3449 // instructions in that block. They cannot be used (except in the phi nodes
3450 // we visit) outside CaseDest, because that block does not dominate its
3451 // successor. If it did, we would not be in this phi node.
3452
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003453 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
3454 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
3455 return false;
3456
3457 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
3458 }
3459
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003460 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003461}
3462
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003463namespace {
3464 /// SwitchLookupTable - This class represents a lookup table that can be used
3465 /// to replace a switch.
3466 class SwitchLookupTable {
3467 public:
3468 /// SwitchLookupTable - Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement
3469 /// with the contents of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the
3470 /// table.
3471 SwitchLookupTable(Module &M,
3472 uint64_t TableSize,
3473 ConstantInt *Offset,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003474 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003475 Constant *DefaultValue,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003476 const DataLayout *DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003477
3478 /// BuildLookup - Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
3479 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
3480 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
3481
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003482 /// WouldFitInRegister - Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
3483 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003484 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003485 uint64_t TableSize,
3486 const Type *ElementType);
3487
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003488 private:
3489 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
3490 // different ways.
3491 enum {
3492 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
3493 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
3494 SingleValueKind,
3495
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003496 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
3497 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
3498 // shift and mask operations.
3499 BitMapKind,
3500
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003501 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
3502 // instructions from the table.
3503 ArrayKind
3504 } Kind;
3505
3506 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
3507 Constant *SingleValue;
3508
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003509 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
3510 ConstantInt *BitMap;
3511 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
3512
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003513 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
3514 GlobalVariable *Array;
3515 };
3516}
3517
3518SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(Module &M,
3519 uint64_t TableSize,
3520 ConstantInt *Offset,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003521 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003522 Constant *DefaultValue,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003523 const DataLayout *DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003524 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
3525 Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003526 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
3527 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003528
3529 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003530 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003531
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003532 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
3533
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003534 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003535 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
3536 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3537 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
3538 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003539 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003540
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003541 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
3542 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003543 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
3544
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003545 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003546 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003547 }
3548
3549 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003550 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00003551 assert(DefaultValue &&
3552 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003553 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003554 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3555 if (!TableContents[I])
3556 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003557 }
3558
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003559 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003560 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003561 }
3562
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003563 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
3564 // that single value.
3565 if (SingleValue) {
3566 Kind = SingleValueKind;
3567 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003568 }
3569
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003570 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003571 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003572 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003573 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
3574 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
3575 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00003576 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
3577 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
3578 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
3579 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
3580 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003581 }
3582 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
3583 BitMapElementTy = IT;
3584 Kind = BitMapKind;
3585 ++NumBitMaps;
3586 return;
3587 }
3588
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003589 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003590 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003591 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
3592
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003593 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
3594 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
3595 Initializer,
3596 "switch.table");
3597 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
3598 Kind = ArrayKind;
3599}
3600
3601Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3602 switch (Kind) {
3603 case SingleValueKind:
3604 return SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003605 case BitMapKind: {
3606 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
3607 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
3608
3609 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
3610 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
3611 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00003612 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003613
3614 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
3615 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
3616 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
3617 "switch.shiftamt");
3618
3619 // Shift down.
3620 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
3621 "switch.downshift");
3622 // Mask off.
3623 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
3624 "switch.masked");
3625 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003626 case ArrayKind: {
3627 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
3628 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array, GEPIndices,
3629 "switch.gep");
3630 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
3631 }
3632 }
3633 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
3634}
3635
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003636bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003637 uint64_t TableSize,
3638 const Type *ElementType) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003639 if (!DL)
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003640 return false;
3641 const IntegerType *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
3642 if (!IT)
3643 return false;
3644 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
3645 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00003646
3647 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
3648 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
3649 return false;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003650 return DL->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003651}
3652
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003653/// ShouldBuildLookupTable - Determine whether a lookup table should be built
Hans Wennborg5cf30be2013-06-04 11:22:30 +00003654/// for this switch, based on the number of cases, size of the table and the
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003655/// types of the results.
3656static bool ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003657 uint64_t TableSize,
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003658 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003659 const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003660 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>& ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003661 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
3662 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003663
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003664 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003665 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003666 for (SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>::const_iterator I = ResultTypes.begin(),
3667 E = ResultTypes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003668 Type *Ty = I->second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003669
3670 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003671 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003672
3673 // Saturate this flag to false.
3674 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003675 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003676
3677 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
3678 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
3679 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
3680 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003681 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003682 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003683
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003684 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
3685 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
3686 return true;
3687
3688 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
3689 if (HasIllegalType)
3690 return false;
3691
3692 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
3693 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
3694 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
3695 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003696}
3697
3698/// SwitchToLookupTable - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
3699/// phi nodes in a common successor block with different constant values,
3700/// replace the switch with lookup tables.
3701static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003702 IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003703 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003704 const DataLayout* DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003705 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00003706
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00003707 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003708 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00003709 return false;
3710
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003711 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
3712 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
3713
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003714 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
3715 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
3716 // string and lookup indices into that.
3717
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00003718 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
3719 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
3720 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003721 return false;
3722
3723 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
3724 // common destination, as well as the the min and max case values.
3725 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
3726 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
3727 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3728 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3729
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003730 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003731 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003732 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
3733 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
3734 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
3735 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
3736
3737 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
3738 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3739 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
3740 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
3741 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
3742 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
3743
3744 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3745 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
3746 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003747 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003748 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003749 return false;
3750
3751 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
3752 for (ResultsTy::iterator I = Results.begin(), E = Results.end(); I!=E; ++I) {
3753 if (!ResultLists.count(I->first))
3754 PHIs.push_back(I->first);
3755 ResultLists[I->first].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, I->second));
3756 }
3757 }
3758
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003759 // Keep track of the result types.
3760 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3761 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
3762 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
3763 }
3764
3765 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
3766 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
3767 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
3768 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
3769
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003770 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
3771 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003772 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003773 bool HasDefaultResults = false;
3774 if (TableHasHoles) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003775 HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
3776 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003777 }
3778 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
3779 if (NeedMask) {
3780 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
3781 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
3782 return false;
3783 if (!(DL && DL->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize)))
3784 return false;
3785 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003786
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003787 for (size_t I = 0, E = DefaultResultsList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3788 PHINode *PHI = DefaultResultsList[I].first;
3789 Constant *Result = DefaultResultsList[I].second;
3790 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003791 }
3792
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003793 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003794 return false;
3795
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003796 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003797 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003798 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
3799 "switch.lookup",
3800 CommonDest->getParent(),
3801 CommonDest);
3802
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003803 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003804 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
3805 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
3806 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003807
3808 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
3809 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003810 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003811 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003812 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
3813 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
3814 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
3815
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003816 // If we have a fully covered lookup table, unconditionally branch to the
3817 // lookup table BB. Otherwise, check if the condition value is within the case
3818 // range. If it is so, branch to the new BB. Otherwise branch to SI's default
3819 // destination.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003820 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = MaxTableSize == TableSize;
3821 if (GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
3822 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003823 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003824 } else {
3825 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
3826 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
3827 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
3828 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003829
3830 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
3831 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003832
3833 if (NeedMask) {
3834 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
3835 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
3836 // and we create a new LookupBB.
3837 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
3838 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
3839 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
3840 "switch.lookup",
3841 CommonDest->getParent(),
3842 CommonDest);
3843
3844 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
3845 APInt MaskInt(TableSize, 0);
3846 APInt One(TableSize, 1);
3847 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
3848 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3849 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
3850 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
3851 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
3852 }
3853 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
3854
3855 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
3856 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
3857 // else continue with table lookup.
3858 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
3859 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
3860 "switch.maskindex");
3861 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
3862 "switch.shifted");
3863 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
3864 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
3865 "switch.lobit");
3866 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
3867
3868 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
3869 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
3870 }
3871
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003872 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003873 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3874 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003875
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003876 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
3877 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003878 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultLists[PHI],
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003879 DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003880
3881 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003882
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00003883 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
3884 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003885 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
3886 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00003887 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
3888 ReturnedEarly = true;
3889 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003890 }
3891
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00003892 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003893 }
3894
3895 if (!ReturnedEarly)
3896 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
3897
3898 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003899 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003900 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003901
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003902 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003903 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003904 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3905 }
3906 SI->eraseFromParent();
3907
3908 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003909 if (NeedMask)
3910 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003911 return true;
3912}
3913
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003914bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003915 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
3916
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00003917 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
3918 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
3919 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
3920 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
3921 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003922 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003923
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00003924 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
3925 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
3926 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003927 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003928
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00003929 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
3930 // away into any preds.
3931 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3932 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3933 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3934 ++BBI;
3935 if (SI == &*BBI)
3936 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003937 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00003938 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003939
3940 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003941 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003942 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003943
3944 // Remove unreachable cases.
3945 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003946 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003947
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003948 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003949 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003950
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003951 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, TTI, DL))
3952 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003953
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003954 return false;
3955}
3956
3957bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
3958 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
3959 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003960
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003961 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
3962 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
3963 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
3964 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
3965 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest)) {
3966 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
3967 IBI->removeDestination(i);
3968 --i; --e;
3969 Changed = true;
3970 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003971 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003972
3973 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
3974 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
3975 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
3976 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
3977 return true;
3978 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003979
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003980 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
3981 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
3982 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
3983 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
3984 return true;
3985 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003986
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003987 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
3988 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003989 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003990 }
3991 return Changed;
3992}
3993
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003994bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003995 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003996
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00003997 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
3998 return true;
3999
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004000 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Rafael Espindolab10a0f22011-06-30 20:14:24 +00004001 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbgOrLifetime();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004002 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
4003 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
4004 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004005
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004006 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
4007 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
4008 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
4009 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
4010 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
4011 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004012 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004013 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, TTI, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004014 return true;
4015 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004016
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00004017 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4018 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
4019 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
4020 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004021 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DL))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004022 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004023 return false;
4024}
4025
4026
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004027bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004028 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004029
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004030 // Conditional branch
4031 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
4032 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4033 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
4034 // switch.
4035 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004036 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004037 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004038
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004039 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
4040 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4041 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
4042 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4043 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4044 ++I;
4045 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004046 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004047 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004048 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
4049 ++I;
4050 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4051 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4052 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004053 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004054 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004055 }
4056 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004057
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004058 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004059 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, DL, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004060 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004061
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00004062 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4063 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
4064 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004065 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DL))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004066 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004067
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004068 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
4069 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
4070 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
4071 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004072 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4073 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004074 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, DL))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004075 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004076 } else {
4077 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004078 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004079 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
4080 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4081 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004082 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), DL))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004083 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004084 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004085 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004086 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004087 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004088 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
4089 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4090 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004091 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), DL))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004092 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004093 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004094
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004095 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
4096 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
4097 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
4098 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004099 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
4100 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004101
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004102 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004103 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
4104 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004105 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
4106 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004107 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, DL) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004108
4109 return false;
4110}
4111
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004112/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
4113static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
4114 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
4115 if (!C)
4116 return false;
4117
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004118 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004119 return false;
4120
4121 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004122 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004123 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004124
4125 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
4126 // control flow (eg. calls)
4127 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004128 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004129 return false;
4130
4131 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
4132 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
4133 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
4134 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
4135
4136 // Look through bitcasts.
4137 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
4138 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
4139
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004140 // Load from null is undefined.
4141 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004142 if (!LI->isVolatile())
4143 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004144
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004145 // Store to null is undefined.
4146 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004147 if (!SI->isVolatile())
4148 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004149 }
4150 return false;
4151}
4152
4153/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004154/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004155static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
4156 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
4157 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
4158 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
4159 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
4160 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
4161 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
4162 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
4163 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
4164 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
4165 // destination from conditional branches.
4166 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4167 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4168 else
4169 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
4170 BI->getSuccessor(0));
4171 BI->eraseFromParent();
4172 return true;
4173 }
4174 // TODO: SwitchInst.
4175 }
4176
4177 return false;
4178}
4179
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004180bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00004181 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004182
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004183 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004184 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004185
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004186 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
4187 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004188 if ((pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) &&
4189 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004190 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00004191 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00004192 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004193 return true;
4194 }
4195
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004196 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
4197 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00004198 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004199
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00004200 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
4201 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
4202
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004203 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
4204 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
4205
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00004206 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
4207 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
4208 // if there are no PHI nodes.
4209 //
4210 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
4211 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004212
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00004213 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
4214
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004215 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
4216 // eliminate it, do so now.
4217 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
4218 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004219 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004220
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004221 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004222 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004223 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004224 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004225 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004226 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004227 }
4228 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004229 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00004230 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4231 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004232 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004233 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004234 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
4235 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4236 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004237 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
4238 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4239 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00004240 }
4241
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004242 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004243}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004244
4245/// SimplifyCFG - This function is used to do simplification of a CFG. For
4246/// example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop, it
4247/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
4248/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
4249///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004250bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004251 const DataLayout *DL) {
4252 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, DL).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004253}